Posstack.com Documentation - User contributions [en]

Add prebuilt sections

2026-03-29T10:01:52Z

An: /* How to add a section preset into your theme */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Add Prebuilt Sections}}

This guide explains how to add prebuilt sections to your pages. To create a new custom page, check out this guide: [[Create_Template_Apply_to_Multiple_Pages|Create a template]].

'''Choose how you want to add your first section to your theme:'''

*Add section presets (from our '''238+ section library''')
*Create your custom sections from scratch

===Add section presets===
====What are section presets====

Section presets are ready-made groups of blocks that you can use on any template. You can add up to 25 section presets to a template, and each section one contains multiple blocks that you can individually customize in terms of appearance, content, layout, and order.

Easy Content Builder offers over 238 section presets that cover all the key features your store might need, like Hero, Reviews, Benefits, How-to guides, FAQs, Social Feeds, Lookbooks, Marquees, Comparison Charts, Parallax, etc.

[[File:Ecb section preset 1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
====How to add a section preset into your theme====

*'''Step 1''': Click '''Apps''' > '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Browse Sections'''.
*'''Step 2''': Find your desired section preset and click '''Add to Template''' to add it to your template.

:[[File:Ecb section preset 2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

*'''Step 3''': Select the Template where you want to add the section preset

:[[File:Ecb section preset 3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

:Templates are saved combinations of sections and settings that control the look, layout, and content of your store's pages. What templates and sections are available depends on the theme you use.
:{{Note| To add the prebuilt section to your Homepage, select '''index''' from the drop-down menu (the '''Index''' refers to the homepage template).|reminder}}

:'''How to check which templates are applied to which pages?'''

:*Option 1: In the theme editor, you can find which templates are applied to which pages

:*Option 2: Navigate to the specific page (product, collection, page, or blog post) in your Shopify admin, and check the bottom right section labeled '''Theme Template'''.

:{{Note|IMPORTANT: If you choose a default page template, any edits will apply to all pages using it. |reminder}}

:{{Note|Want to create a custom template? Learn more [[Create_Template_Apply_to_Multiple_Pages|here]].|inline}}

*'''Step 4''': Add, edit, reorder sections and blocks in your Theme Editor.

:For each section, make sure you add and configure the '''[[Add section settings#Step 1: Add Section Settings block|Section Settings]]''' block to control consistent global styles for that section (Multi-column Layouts, Colors, and Margin & Padding, etc).

:{{Note|IMPORTANT: You can add up to '''25 sections per template'''. Each section can include '''multiple blocks'''. |inline}}

:[[File:Ecb section preset 4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

===Create your custom sections from scratch===
To create your own custom section from scratch, learn more [[Add_section_settings|here]].

Block Buttons

2026-01-27T07:00:00Z

An: /* Button global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Button}}

This content block helps you add predefined buttons for actions on a page.

=== What is the Button section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the Button section for your Shopify themes:

* Multiple buttons within a section: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo3.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Ghost button style: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/swimwear here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Text link: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/clothing here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

=== How to add Buttons section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Buttons''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Buttons''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Buttons'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Buttons''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.
:[[File:Block button 2.png|1200x1200px]]
{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

=== Button global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Button''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

{{Note|Under the Pro plan, you can add 3 buttons per row in the Button section. With the Free plan, only one button is visible on the front end, but you can still use and configure the Button section.
 
The Pro plan also supports Modal option for Button, which opens links in a Lightbox. Useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms.|reminder}}

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align text to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Rounded Border
|Enable this setting to apply rounded corners to the buttons. To increase the border radius of the button, you can use the Custom CSS option following this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gN20FiUvVZc video tutorial].
|-
|Full-width
|Enable responsive full-width button.
'''Tips''': If you add multiple buttons on the Hero banner, you should enable full-width to create equal-width CTA buttons.
If you want to set the width of the container where you display the CTAs, use the '''Container Max Width''' or '''Main Column Width''' under [[Section Settings]], depending on which option best suits you.
|-
|Button Text
|Enter the button’s text. Leave this field empty to disable the button.
|-
|Button URL
|Set the internal or external URL for the button’s link.
|-
|Button Style
|Apply a different look for the button. You can choose a Primary Button/Danger Button for the primary action button, a Default Button (outlined button)/Secondary Button for a medium emphasis, or a Text/Link Button for a low emphasis action button.
|-
|Button Size
|Set the button size - Small, Default, or Large.
|-
|Target
|Open the link in the same window, a new window, or modal.
Modal (Pro only): opens a link in a Lightbox. Useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms. 
You can choose from three modal sizes (Pro plan only): 
- Modal (Pro) for a standard popup 
- Large Modal (Pro) for a bigger popup 
- Large Full (Pro) for a full-screen popup. 
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===How to add multiple buttons===

{{Note|The button section lets you add 3 buttons per row (this feature is available for the Pro plan). You can still use and configure the Button section under the Free plan; however, only one button is visible on the front end.|inline}}

* Step 1: Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Button''' section.
::Here you can define multi-column layouts, enable fullwidth, set the section's max-width, background color, global margin/padding, etc.

*Step 2: Add a '''Button''' section. This provides block-level configurations in addition to the global configuration level (via Section Settings above). Then configure as you wish:

::*Rounded Border
::*Full Width: we recommend enabling this setting to create equal-width CTA buttons (perfect for the Hero banner)
::*Set the number of buttons per row on Desktop/Mobile.
:[[File:Ecb-button.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

{{Note|Note: If you want to set the width of the container where you display the CTAs, use the '''Container Max Width''' or '''Main Column Width''' under [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]], depending on which option best suits you.
[[File:Ecb-col-width.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

In this example, we set this hero section with '''Two Col: First Block Right''' layout. Here is why we use this layout setup:

* The First Block on the right column is a blank [[Block_Custom_HTML|Custom HTML]] section. We used this special Custom HTML section to create a blank column on the right.
* Then we can add multiple sections below the Custom HTML (all these sections are shown on the left column)

So, you simply resize the width of the Main column (which is the Custom HTML section) until you're happy with width for the left column.

|inline}}

===How to enable the Modal for the CTAs===

This feature allows you to open links in a lightbox, making it useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms ([https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-button view the demo here]).

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section (to control the global settings of the Button section)
*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Button''' section and configure it as you wish.
*'''Step 3''': Under the Target field, choose '''Modal'''.

====Add a Size Chart Link in the Product Information Section====

[[File:Sizechart link.jpg|800px|frameless]]

If you want to add a '''Size Chart''' link in the '''Product Information''' section (Shopify product detail page) that opens in a modal popup, follow these steps:

*'''Step 1''': Create a page for your size chart under Shopify > '''Pages'''. Add your size chart details or custom content.
:[[File:Size chart page.jpg|800px|frameless]]
*'''Step 2''': Add a Button block in the '''Product Information''' section.
:{{Note| If it's in the core product information, skip '''Section Settings''' and just add the Block you want. [[File:Product info section note.jpg|800px|frameless]]|inline}}
*'''Step 3''': Configure the button. Link to the page from Step 1 in the '''Button URL''' and set the '''Target''' to '''Modal'''.
:[[File:Button modal config2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

Once done, clicking the button will show your size chart in a modal popup.

===Add other content blocks===
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Buttons

2026-01-27T06:59:41Z

An: /* Button global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Button}}

This content block helps you add predefined buttons for actions on a page.

=== What is the Button section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the Button section for your Shopify themes:

* Multiple buttons within a section: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo3.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Ghost button style: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/swimwear here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Text link: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/clothing here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

=== How to add Buttons section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Buttons''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Buttons''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Buttons'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Buttons''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.
:[[File:Block button 2.png|1200x1200px]]
{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

=== Button global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Button''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

{{Note|Under the Pro plan, you can add 3 buttons per row in the Button section. With the Free plan, only one button is visible on the front end, but you can still use and configure the Button section.
 
The Pro plan also supports Modal option for Button, which opens links in a Lightbox. Useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms.|reminder}}

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align text to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Rounded Border
|Enable this setting to apply rounded corners to the buttons. To increase the border radius of the button, you can use the Custom CSS option following this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gN20FiUvVZc video tutorial].
|-
|Full-width
|Enable responsive full-width button.
'''Tips''': If you add multiple buttons on the Hero banner, you should enable full-width to create equal-width CTA buttons.
If you want to set the width of the container where you display the CTAs, use the '''Container Max Width''' or '''Main Column Width''' under [[Section Settings]], depending on which option best suits you.
|-
|Button Text
|Enter the button’s text. Leave this field empty to disable the button.
|-
|Button URL
|Set the internal or external URL for the button’s link.
|-
|Button Style
|Apply a different look for the button. You can choose a Primary Button/Danger Button for the primary action button, a Default Button (outlined button)/Secondary Button for a medium emphasis, or a Text/Link Button for a low emphasis action button.
|-
|Button Size
|Set the button size - Small, Default, or Large.
|-
|Target
|Open the link in the same window, a new window, or modal.
Modal (Pro only): opens a link in a Lightbox. Useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms. 
You can choose from three modal sizes (Pro plan only): 
- Modal (Pro) for a standard popup 
- Large Modal (Pro) for a bigger popup 
- Large Full (Pro) for a full-screen popup. 
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===How to add multiple buttons===

{{Note|The button section lets you add 3 buttons per row (this feature is available for the Pro plan). You can still use and configure the Button section under the Free plan; however, only one button is visible on the front end.|inline}}

* Step 1: Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Button''' section.
::Here you can define multi-column layouts, enable fullwidth, set the section's max-width, background color, global margin/padding, etc.

*Step 2: Add a '''Button''' section. This provides block-level configurations in addition to the global configuration level (via Section Settings above). Then configure as you wish:

::*Rounded Border
::*Full Width: we recommend enabling this setting to create equal-width CTA buttons (perfect for the Hero banner)
::*Set the number of buttons per row on Desktop/Mobile.
:[[File:Ecb-button.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

{{Note|Note: If you want to set the width of the container where you display the CTAs, use the '''Container Max Width''' or '''Main Column Width''' under [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]], depending on which option best suits you.
[[File:Ecb-col-width.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

In this example, we set this hero section with '''Two Col: First Block Right''' layout. Here is why we use this layout setup:

* The First Block on the right column is a blank [[Block_Custom_HTML|Custom HTML]] section. We used this special Custom HTML section to create a blank column on the right.
* Then we can add multiple sections below the Custom HTML (all these sections are shown on the left column)

So, you simply resize the width of the Main column (which is the Custom HTML section) until you're happy with width for the left column.

|inline}}

===How to enable the Modal for the CTAs===

This feature allows you to open links in a lightbox, making it useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms ([https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-button view the demo here]).

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section (to control the global settings of the Button section)
*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Button''' section and configure it as you wish.
*'''Step 3''': Under the Target field, choose '''Modal'''.

====Add a Size Chart Link in the Product Information Section====

[[File:Sizechart link.jpg|800px|frameless]]

If you want to add a '''Size Chart''' link in the '''Product Information''' section (Shopify product detail page) that opens in a modal popup, follow these steps:

*'''Step 1''': Create a page for your size chart under Shopify > '''Pages'''. Add your size chart details or custom content.
:[[File:Size chart page.jpg|800px|frameless]]
*'''Step 2''': Add a Button block in the '''Product Information''' section.
:{{Note| If it's in the core product information, skip '''Section Settings''' and just add the Block you want. [[File:Product info section note.jpg|800px|frameless]]|inline}}
*'''Step 3''': Configure the button. Link to the page from Step 1 in the '''Button URL''' and set the '''Target''' to '''Modal'''.
:[[File:Button modal config2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

Once done, clicking the button will show your size chart in a modal popup.

===Add other content blocks===
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Buttons

2026-01-27T06:58:04Z

An: /* Button global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Button}}

This content block helps you add predefined buttons for actions on a page.

=== What is the Button section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the Button section for your Shopify themes:

* Multiple buttons within a section: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo3.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Ghost button style: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/swimwear here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Text link: see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/clothing here].
:[[File:Ecb-button-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

=== How to add Buttons section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Buttons''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Buttons''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Buttons'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Buttons''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.
:[[File:Block button 2.png|1200x1200px]]
{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

=== Button global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Button''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

{{Note|Under the Pro plan, you can add 3 buttons per row in the Button section. With the Free plan, only one button is visible on the front end, but you can still use and configure the Button section.
 
The Pro plan also supports Modal option for Button, which opens links in a Lightbox. Useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms.|reminder}}

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align text to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Rounded Border
|Enable this setting to apply rounded corners to the buttons. To increase the border radius of the button, you can use the Custom CSS option following this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gN20FiUvVZc video tutorial].
|-
|Full-width
|Enable responsive full-width button.
'''Tips''': If you add multiple buttons on the Hero banner, you should enable full-width to create equal-width CTA buttons.
If you want to set the width of the container where you display the CTAs, use the '''Container Max Width''' or '''Main Column Width''' under [[Section Settings]], depending on which option best suits you.
|-
|Button Text
|Enter the button’s text. Leave this field empty to disable the button.
|-
|Button URL
|Set the internal or external URL for the button’s link.
|-
|Button Style
|Apply a different look for the button. You can choose a Primary Button/Danger Button for the primary action button, a Default Button (outlined button)/Secondary Button for a medium emphasis, or a Text/Link Button for a low emphasis action button.
|-
|Button Size
|Set the button size - Small, Default, or Large.
|-
|Target
|Open the link in the same window, a new window, or modal.
Modal (Pro only): opens a link in a Lightbox. Useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms.
You can choose from three modal sizes (Pro plan only):
- Modal (Pro) for a standard popup
- Large Modal (Pro) for a bigger popup
- Large Full (Pro) for a full-screen popup.
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===How to add multiple buttons===

{{Note|The button section lets you add 3 buttons per row (this feature is available for the Pro plan). You can still use and configure the Button section under the Free plan; however, only one button is visible on the front end.|inline}}

* Step 1: Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Button''' section.
::Here you can define multi-column layouts, enable fullwidth, set the section's max-width, background color, global margin/padding, etc.

*Step 2: Add a '''Button''' section. This provides block-level configurations in addition to the global configuration level (via Section Settings above). Then configure as you wish:

::*Rounded Border
::*Full Width: we recommend enabling this setting to create equal-width CTA buttons (perfect for the Hero banner)
::*Set the number of buttons per row on Desktop/Mobile.
:[[File:Ecb-button.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

{{Note|Note: If you want to set the width of the container where you display the CTAs, use the '''Container Max Width''' or '''Main Column Width''' under [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]], depending on which option best suits you.
[[File:Ecb-col-width.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

In this example, we set this hero section with '''Two Col: First Block Right''' layout. Here is why we use this layout setup:

* The First Block on the right column is a blank [[Block_Custom_HTML|Custom HTML]] section. We used this special Custom HTML section to create a blank column on the right.
* Then we can add multiple sections below the Custom HTML (all these sections are shown on the left column)

So, you simply resize the width of the Main column (which is the Custom HTML section) until you're happy with width for the left column.

|inline}}

===How to enable the Modal for the CTAs===

This feature allows you to open links in a lightbox, making it useful for embedding content from YouTube, Vimeo, Instagram, TikTok, or Google Maps/Forms ([https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-button view the demo here]).

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section (to control the global settings of the Button section)
*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Button''' section and configure it as you wish.
*'''Step 3''': Under the Target field, choose '''Modal'''.

====Add a Size Chart Link in the Product Information Section====

[[File:Sizechart link.jpg|800px|frameless]]

If you want to add a '''Size Chart''' link in the '''Product Information''' section (Shopify product detail page) that opens in a modal popup, follow these steps:

*'''Step 1''': Create a page for your size chart under Shopify > '''Pages'''. Add your size chart details or custom content.
:[[File:Size chart page.jpg|800px|frameless]]
*'''Step 2''': Add a Button block in the '''Product Information''' section.
:{{Note| If it's in the core product information, skip '''Section Settings''' and just add the Block you want. [[File:Product info section note.jpg|800px|frameless]]|inline}}
*'''Step 3''': Configure the button. Link to the page from Step 1 in the '''Button URL''' and set the '''Target''' to '''Modal'''.
:[[File:Button modal config2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

Once done, clicking the button will show your size chart in a modal popup.

===Add other content blocks===
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-12T03:29:29Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: Insert your table data here:
:1. Create your table in a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field. This is what the table data in the CSV file looks like.
:[[File:Ecb-table-csv2.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: (Optional) Leave this field blank or use the CSS class '''uk-text-bold''' to make the primary column text bold.
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-default''''' to '''''uk-button-primary''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:58:34Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: Insert your table data here:
:1. Create your table in a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field. This is what the table data in the CSV file looks like.
:[[File:Ecb-table-csv2.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-default''''' to '''''uk-button-primary''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:56:00Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: Insert your table data here:
:1. Create your table in a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
:[[File:Ecb-table-csv2.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-default''''' to '''''uk-button-primary''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Ecb-table-csv2.jpg

2025-12-11T08:55:49Z

An:

ECB - chart guide (new) - csv example

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:55:03Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: Insert your table data here:
:1. Create your table in a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
:[[File:Ecb-table-csv.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-default''''' to '''''uk-button-primary''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:48:13Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: Insert your table data here:
:1. Create your table in a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-default''''' to '''''uk-button-primary''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:47:25Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: Insert your table data here:
:1. Create your table in a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:45:44Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: Insert your table data here:
:1. Create your table in a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:41:50Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: If you're new here, check the [[Block_Table#Table_global_settings|General Configuration]] guide.
:1. Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:40:58Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: If you're new here, check the [[Block_Table#Table_global_settings|General Configuration]] guide.
:{{Note|1. Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]|inline}}
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:40:20Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: If you're new here, check the [[Block_Table#Table_global_settings|General Configuration]] guide.
{{Note|:1. Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]|inline}}
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:39:30Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: If you're new here, check the [[Block_Table#Table_global_settings|General Configuration]] guide.
:1. Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
:[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:38:15Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: If you're new here, check the [[Block_Table#Table_global_settings|General Configuration]] guide.
:1. Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:37:08Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: If you're new here, check the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide.
:1. Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc.) as shown in the example below.
:2. Go to File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv).
:3. Open the file in a text editor like Notepad or TextEdit, then copy the data and paste it into this field.
[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:31:44Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Table Card Style: '''uk-table-large uk-table-rounded2'''
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''primary-column uk-text-bold'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-default uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:27:03Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''uk-text-primary'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-secondary uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:25:53Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
[[File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg|1024px|frameless]]
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''uk-text-primary'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-secondary uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Ecb-table-gdoc.jpg

2025-12-11T08:25:41Z

An:

ECB - chart guide (new) - gdocs

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:24:44Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''uk-text-primary'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-secondary uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:24:23Z

An: /* Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)
[[File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg|250px|frameless]]

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''uk-text-primary'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-secondary uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Ecb-table-sectionsettings.jpg

2025-12-11T08:24:06Z

An:

ECB - chart (new) guide - step 1

Block Table

2025-12-11T08:20:45Z

An: /* Use case 1: Pricing table and product feature comparison */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Table}}

The '''Table section''' lets you create comparison tables on any page, allowing your users to compare your product features and key differences side-by-side. The Table section is a great add-on to create Product feature comparisons, Pricing Table, or any custom data table.

{{Note|NOTE: This block is only available for the PRO plan. You can configure this block normally in the Theme Editor; however, you need to upgrade your plan to apply them to the front end.|inline}}

== What is the Table section perfect for? ==
You have various options to use the Table section for your Shopify themes:

* Product comparison charts - view the demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#responsive-product-comparison-chart here].[[File:Ecb-table-v1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v3.jpg|frameless|800x800px]][[File:Ecb-table-v4.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table with custom data - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#pricing-table-and-product-feature-comparison-with-custom-data here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-w-img.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Equal height) - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#equal-height-pricing-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-card.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Pricing table (Flexible height)
:[[File:Ecb-table-pricing-flex.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Comparison data table - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#comparison-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-data.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#long-form-data-table here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-search-sorting.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Data table with the first row and column as the header
:[[File:Ecb-table-with-heading.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
*Size chart & fit guide - see an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table#size-chart-and-fit-guide here].
:[[File:Ecb-table-sizechart.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

==How to add Table section==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, available [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3-7nTz-c4yQ&list=PLZdliUBbfeeGpJ6_zH4FDyF9QvYv1Pz-2&index=8 here].

=== How to add Table section ===

*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Table''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Table''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Table'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|reminder}}

==Customize Table section==
=== Table global settings ===
From the sidebar of your Shopify theme editor, click on the Table title to view the details of the settings.

{| class="wikitable"
|+
!Table Type
!Select the type you want - Normal Table, Separate Cards, Data Table.
|-
|Table Data
|Add data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Steps to create and export CSV data from Google Spreadsheet:

# Create a spreadsheet (Google Docs, Excel, etc)
# Add data to the sheet. Sample CSV file: [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 view here].
# Click the menu File > Download > Comma Separated Values (.csv)
# Open the file using a text editor like Windows Notepad or TextEdit. Then, copy data from the downloaded file and paste it into this field.

'''NOTE #1''': Easy Content Builder lets you add images on the heading (the first row). Here are the CSV file format:

* Leave the first row in your CSV file blank to display only images on the heading (You will add the images under your Theme Editor > Easy Content Builder > Table section)[[File:Ecb-table-heading-config.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
* To display images with text or button: add the text or button - using the button format '''(your_button_label)your_url''' into the first row. [[File:Ecb table heading cta.png|frameless|800x800px]]

'''NOTE #2''': If you want to keep specific elements (e.g. CTA buttons) in the same row in the comparison table, make sure you add the data in the same row in the sheet.

[[File:Ecb-table-csv.png|border|frameless|500x500px]]

'''NOTE #3''': To show the '''Yes'''/'''No''' icons, simply enter the 'YES' or 'NO' text (Must be in uppercase) into the sheet.

'''NOTE #4''': To add a CTA button, enter your sheet using this format:

''(your_button_label)your_url''

For example: '''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all elements of the Section title to the left, right, or center.
|-
|Header First Row
|Display the first row as the header
|-
|Header First Column
|Display the first column as the header
|-
|Table/Card style
|Add CSS classes to change the table/card style. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
Here are some useful classes you can use (Feel free to add multiple classes, separating each with a space):

* '''uk-table-divider''': class to display a divider between table rows.
* '''uk-table-striped''': class to add zebra-striping to a table.
* '''uk-card-hover''': class to display a hover state on table rows.
* '''uk-card-primary''': class to emphasize a card with a primary color. You can switch between difference styles (uk-card-secondary, uk-card-default, uk-card-primary)
* '''uk-table-middle''' class to vertically center table content.
* '''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text. It's handy for those complicated product spec tables because the softer color makes it way easier for people to scan through the information.
* '''uk-card-small''' (or '''uk-card-large'''): class to a table to make it smaller or larger.
* '''uk-height-1-1''': This class applies a height of 100%. This only works if the parent element has a set height.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': Add this class to apply rounded corners.
|-
|Primary Column
|Set a column to be the primary one that you want to attract the user's attention. E.g. enter '2' to set the 2nd column as the primary one.
|-
|Primary Column Style
|Add CSS classes to change the primary column style. Please look at the helpful classes in the '''Table/Card Style''' field mentioned earlier or explore [[Block Table#Use Cases|Use cases]] below to learn more about the predefined CSS class available in Easy Content Builder.
|-
|Link Style
|Add CSS classes applied to links in the table. Here's the predefined CSS classes available in Easy Content Builder:
'''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''

'''NOTE #1''': You need to specify the button/link format in the CSV file following this format:

'''(Buy Now)<nowiki>https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder</nowiki>'''

'''NOTE #2''': You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.

'''NOTE #3:''' the '''''uk-text-nowrap''''' class helps keep your button label on a single line, which is perfect for longer text labels.
|-
|Icon Yes
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''Yes''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon No
|Upload the SVG icon to display in the '''No''' cell of the comparison table.
|-
|Icon Width
|Set the width (in pixel) of the YES/NO icons.
|-
|Image Width
|Set the width (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image Height
|Set the height (in pixels) of the featured images on the comparison table header.
|-
|Image
|Add the image you want to feature on the comparison table header.
|-
|Animate on scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Margin
|Set the vertical spacing between elements.
|}

===Adjust the width of the table columns===

To adjust the width of each column, you can follow these steps:

1. Click on the '''App''' menu where you added the Table section.

[[File:Ecb-table-width1.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]
2. Enter this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field:

<pre>
td:nth-child(1) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(2) {min-width: 150px;}
td:nth-child(3) {min-width: 150px;}
</pre>

The numbers (1), (2), and (3) indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd columns in your table. To tweak all columns in your table, just add similar code for each one, updating the number and the width value accordingly.

[[File:Ecb-table-width2.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

=== Add multiple images into the Table Header ===

By default, our Table section allows for up to 6 images in a product comparison chart, which you can upload directly in the Table configuration panel. If you need to display more than 6 images, you can follow this alternative method.

[[File:Table-multi-imgs.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''Step 1''': Create a spreadsheet using tools like Google Docs or Excel.

'''Step 2''': Input your data into the sheet and insert images into each cell above the heading text in this format:
<pre>(IMAGE)https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0683/5339/2927/files/tee_social2.jpg </pre>

Ensure there are no spaces between (IMAGE) and the image URL.
{{Note|Note: In addition to the Header position, you can position the image in any row or column of your choice.|reminder}}

[[File:Table-img1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 3''': Export the file as a CSV and copy the table content into the Table section. If you're unfamiliar with the Table section, please refer to [[Block_Table#Table_settings|this guide]] for more details.

[[File:Table-img2.jpg|800px|frameless]]

'''Step 4 (optional)''': If your images have varying heights, you can maintain bottom alignment by adding this code in the '''Custom CSS''' field. For guidance on applying custom code to the Table section, refer to [[Block_Table#Adjust_the_width_of_the_table_columns|this guide]].

<pre>.uk-table thead th {
vertical-align: bottom;
}</pre>

==Use Cases==

===Use case 1: Product Feature Comparison Chart===
[[File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg|1024px|frameless]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a '''Table section''' and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Header First Column: enabled
*Primary Column: 3 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter this CSS class '''uk-text-primary'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-secondary uk-text-nowrap'''
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon width: 24
*Image Width: 150
*Image Height: 150
*Image: upload the images that you want to display on the Header.

===Use case 2: Equal height Pricing table ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo2-config.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this pricing table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this Pricing table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

* Table Type: Separate Cards
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-secondary uk-height-1-1 uk-border-rounded.'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-secondary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-primary''''' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Primary Column: 2 (you can change to the column you want)
*Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-card-hover uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1'''.
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-card-primary''''' to the '''''uk-card-default''''' or '''''uk-card-se'''condary'' to change the look of the cards. |inline}}
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary uk-text-nowrap'''
:{{Note|You can change '''''uk-button-primary''''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

===Use case 3: Comparison chart ===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo3-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this comparison table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this comparison table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Normal Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=73807068 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Header First Row: enabled
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Primary Column: 1 (you can change to the column you want)
* Primary Column Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-text-bold uk-text-success'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
* Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

=== Use case 4: Long-form data table with a Search box, Sorting in ascending or descending order, and pagination.===
[[File:Ecb-table-demo4-config.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

Here are the configurations for this data table sample:

'''Step 1''': Add [[Add_section_settings#Add_Section|Section Settings]] to specify the global configuration of this data table (e.g. The column width, background color, etc.)

'''Step 2''': Add a Table section and configure it as follows:

*Table Type: Data Table
*Table Data: add your custom data following this [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1-g1rVu2XeQiD4d-fNjbpISMNYorgELGn66ETHuLQGdk/edit#gid=951135469 sample CSV file]. Please refer to the [[Block Table#Table settings|General Configuration]] guide for more details.
*Table / Card style: enter this CSS class '''uk-table-striped'''
*Link Style: enter these CSS classes '''uk-button uk-button-primary'''
:{{Note|You can change '''uk-button-primary''' to '''''uk-button-default''''', '''''uk-button-secondary''''', '''''uk-button-link''''', or '''''uk-button-text''''' to change the look of the buttons.|inline}}
*Icon Yes: upload your own CSV icon
*Icon No: upload your own CSV icon
*Image width: 24

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Ecb-table-guide-1.jpg

2025-12-11T08:20:31Z

An:

ECB - Product comparison chart (new)

Global Settings

2025-11-14T03:26:38Z

An: /* Disable Lazy Loading */

The configurations under the Settings apply to blocks created with the Posstack Easy Content Builder app.

[[File:Ecb-global-settings1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

==Scale Up Effect (PRO)==
Activate this feature to make images fade in and scale up.

Once enabled, it will affect all blocks created with Easy Content Builder, including:
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-circle-menu Circle Menu]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-image-with-text Image With Text]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-featured-products-collections Featured Products]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-icons-with-text#scrolling-logo-list Icons With Text] (Note: The scale effect only applies to icons/images wider than 100px and does not apply to SVG icons.)
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Video Slider/Grid] (Note: the scale up effect applies only to video thumbnails, like those in the Video Slider)
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table Comparison Table]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-article-carousel Blog Posts Slider/Grid].
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-title Section Title]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-gallery Gallery]

== Disable Lazy Loading ==
If you need to disable Lazy Loading for all images made with Easy Content Builder, you can easily do that in the Settings (New) section.

{{Note|'''Note''': the background image, which you find in the Section Settings block, doesn't use Lazy Loading by default. So, changing the Lazy Loading setting won’t impact the background image.
[[File:Ecb-sectionsetting-bgimg.jpg|200px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

== Custom Image Placerholder==
'''Custom Placeholder''': Activate this option to include a placeholder image for the Image With Text section.

'''Image Placeholder Name''': Enter the name of your placeholder image (eg. ''ecb-dog-food-hero.jpg'')

{{Note|You need to upload an image with the name you specify here to your store. In your Shopify admin, go to Content > Files, click "Upload files", select your file, and then click "Open".|reminder}}

Global Settings

2025-11-14T03:26:19Z

An:

The configurations under the Settings apply to blocks created with the Posstack Easy Content Builder app.

[[File:Ecb-global-settings1.jpg|800px|frameless]]

==Scale Up Effect (PRO)==
Activate this feature to make images fade in and scale up.

Once enabled, it will affect all blocks created with Easy Content Builder, including:
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-circle-menu Circle Menu]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-image-with-text Image With Text]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-featured-products-collections Featured Products]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-icons-with-text#scrolling-logo-list Icons With Text] (Note: The scale effect only applies to icons/images wider than 100px and does not apply to SVG icons.)
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Video Slider/Grid] (Note: the scale up effect applies only to video thumbnails, like those in the Video Slider)
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-table Comparison Table]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-article-carousel Blog Posts Slider/Grid].
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-title Section Title]
* [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-gallery Gallery]

== Disable Lazy Loading ==
If you need to disable Lazy Loading for all images made with Easy Content Builder, you can easily do that in the Settings (New) section.

{{Note|'''Note''': the background image, which you find in the Section Settings block, doesn't use Lazy Loading by default. So, changing the Lazy Loading setting won’t impact the background image.
[[File:Ecb-sectionsetting-bgimg.jpg|400px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

== Custom Image Placerholder==
'''Custom Placeholder''': Activate this option to include a placeholder image for the Image With Text section.

'''Image Placeholder Name''': Enter the name of your placeholder image (eg. ''ecb-dog-food-hero.jpg'')

{{Note|You need to upload an image with the name you specify here to your store. In your Shopify admin, go to Content > Files, click "Upload files", select your file, and then click "Open".|reminder}}

File:Ecb-sectionsetting-bgimg.jpg

2025-11-14T03:26:09Z

An:

BG image under Section Settings

File:Ecb-global-settings1.jpg

2025-11-14T03:24:51Z

An:

ECB Global Setting (update 1)

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:51:24Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
:
:'''EXAMPLE''' '''- Icons With Text''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.

:
:'''EXAMPLE''' '''- Card Style''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/pizza-ovens live demo]):[[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

:
:'''EXAMPLE - Collapsible Icons With Text''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):[[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

:'''EXAMPLE''' '''- Autoscrolling Text Bar''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/homepage-flowers live demo])

:{{Note|To display a long text in one line, use '''nowrap max-width-500''' (replace 500 with a value greater than your text length).|inline}}

:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-textbar.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]'''EXAMPLE''' '''- Autoscrolling Image Carousel''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/travel-tumbler Live Demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-img.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:50:07Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

:'''EXAMPLE''' '''- Icons With Text''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.

:'''EXAMPLE''' '''- Card Style''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/pizza-ovens live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

:'''EXAMPLE - Collapsible Icons With Text''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

:'''EXAMPLE''' '''- Autoscrolling Text Bar''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/homepage-flowers live demo])

:{{Note|To display a long text in one line, use '''nowrap max-width-500''' (replace 500 with a value greater than your text length).|inline}}

:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-textbar.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]'''EXAMPLE''' '''- Autoscrolling Image Carousel''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/travel-tumbler Live Demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-img.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-img.jpg

2025-11-04T04:48:41Z

An:

IWT Example - Image Carousel

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:39:27Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/pizza-ovens live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/homepage-flowers live demo])

:{{Note|To display a long text in one line, use '''nowrap max-width-500''' (replace 500 with a value greater than your text length).|inline}}

:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-textbar.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:38:33Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/pizza-ovens live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/homepage-flowers live demo])

:{{Note|To display a long text in one line, use '''nowrap max-width-500''' (replace 500 with a value greater than your text length).|inline}}

:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-textbar.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:37:31Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/pizza-ovens live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]):
:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

:'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/homepage-flowers live demo])

:{{Note|To display a long text in one line, use '''nowrap max-width-500''' (replace 500 with a value greater than your text length).|inline}}

:[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-textbar.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:34:36Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.
'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/pizza-ovens live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/homepage-flowers live demo])

{{Note|To display a long text in one line, use '''nowrap max-width-500''' (replace 500 with a value greater than your text length).|inline}}

[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-textbar.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:33:07Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.
'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/pizza-ovens live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/homepage-flowers live demo])

To display a long text in one line, use nowrap max-width-500 (replace 500 with a value greater than your text length).

[[File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-textbar.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Iwt-class-eg-scrolling-textbar.jpg

2025-11-04T04:32:47Z

An:

IWT example - scrolling text bar

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:13:14Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.
'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/pizza-ovens live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

'''EXAMPLE''' (See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/bundle-4 live demo]): [[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T04:03:53Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.
[[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

[[File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Iwt-class-eg-toggle.jpg

2025-11-04T04:03:40Z

An:

IWT example - collapsible section

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T03:50:06Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

'''// Define Icon Width & Height'''

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Add a style to cards:'''

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.
[[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

'''// Adjust Vertical Alignment'''

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

'''// Enable Icons With Text Slider'''
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

'''// Adjust Title and Body text size and color'''
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

'''// Use Metaobjects'''
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

'''// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons'''

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

'''// Enable Auto-scrolling:'''

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

'''// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:'''

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T03:46:28Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

// Define Icon Width & Height

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

// Add a style to cards:

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.
[[File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

/ Adjust Vertical Alignment

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

// Enable Icons With Text Slider
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

// Adjust Title and Body text size and color
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

// Use Metaobjects
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

// Enable Auto-scrolling:

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Iwt-class-eg-card-style.jpg

2025-11-04T03:46:14Z

An:

IWT Example - card style

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T03:36:10Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See more examples of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

// Define Icon Width & Height

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

[[File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]

// Add a style to cards:

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.
/ Adjust Vertical Alignment

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

// Enable Icons With Text Slider
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

// Adjust Title and Body text size and color
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

// Use Metaobjects
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

// Enable Auto-scrolling:

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

File:Iwt-class-eg-dimension.jpg

2025-11-04T03:35:55Z

An:

IWT example - width + height

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T03:20:34Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

// Define Icon Width & Height

*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).

// Add a style to cards:

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.
/ Adjust Vertical Alignment

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

// Enable Icons With Text Slider
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

// Adjust Title and Body text size and color
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

// Use Metaobjects
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

// Enable Auto-scrolling:

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}

Block Icons With Text

2025-11-04T03:10:31Z

An: /* Global settings */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Block: Icons With Text}}

{{Note|Easy Content Builder offers 4 sections for managing images:
*[[Block_Image|Image Section]]: Ideal for showcasing a single image.
*[[Block_Image_With_Text|Images With Text]]: Great for presenting images alongside headings, descriptions, and CTA buttons, with the option to customize the ratio of image to text.
*[[Block_Gallery|Gallery]]: Perfect for creating a grid of photos and videos. Clicking on an image or video opens a lightbox popup to display related content.
*Icons With Text (the current page you are viewing): Designed for displaying a slider or grid of images, icons, and text. This section can be used for showcasing Trust Badges, a scrolling announcement bar, logo lists, testimonials, or any text columns with icons.|reminder}}
== Overview ==
'''Icons With Text''' helps you create separate content blocks (Each block comes with its heading, description, and icon). You can easily position the icon (left, right, center, or bottom) to pair with the wrapped text.

=== What is the Icons With Text section perfect for? ===
You have various options to use the '''Icons With Text''' section for your Shopify themes:

* Trust badges: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo8.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Payment icons: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/shopify-bundles here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo1.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Shipping info: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/reading-desk-lamp here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo7.png|border|frameless|400x400px]]
* Feature highlights: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/vitamin-d-boost here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo2.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Testimonial slider: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo4.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]
* Logo Listing: See an example [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/gym-supplements here] or scrolling logo list:
:[[File:Ecb-icon-text-demo6.png|border|frameless|800x800px]]

== How to add Icons With Text section ==
=== Watch video tutorial===
Be sure to watch the step-by-step video tutorials demonstrating how to utilize the sections provided in Posstack Easy Content Builder, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=23m3fbMu0Ic&list=UULF7ZIZyAESKFQKzo42MU4LQg&index=1 click here to watch the video].

=== Add Icons With Text section ===
*'''Step 1''': Add a '''Section Settings''' section that allows you to control the global settings of the '''Icons With Text''' section.

:In this special section, you can specify multi-column layouts, activate full width, determine the section's maximum width, choose a background color, and set global margins and padding, among other options.

:{{Note|Note: If you include the '''Icons With Text''' in the core product information, skip the step for adding '''Section Settings'''. Just add the '''Icons With Text'''. [[File:Ecb add section core product info.jpg|800px|frameless]]|reminder}}

*'''Step 2''': Add an '''Icons With Text''' section and customize the settings according to your preferences.

{{Note|''If you are new to our Easy Content Builder, please take a look at the [[Add_section_settings|Add Sections]] section for detailed instructions on how to add a section to your theme.|inline}}

== Customize Icons With Text ==
=== Global settings ===
From the Shopify theme editor, click on '''Icons With Text''' on the sidebar to view the details of settings.

[[File:Iwt-config-new.jpg|800px|frameless]]

{| class="wikitable"
!Section settings
!Description
|-
|Image Position
|Set the position of the icon (left, right, center, bottom) to pair with the wrapped text. Applied to desktop view only.
|-
|Text Alignment
|Align all content elements to the left, right, or center.
If "Inherit" is enabled, the text alignment will follow the page's configuration. This is helpful for RTL (right-to-left) pages, as it automatically adjusts the direction of text and icons in Icons With Text from left-to-right (LTR) to right-to-left when languages such as Arabic, Persian, or Hebrew are changed.
|-
|Item Margin
|Adjust the bottom spacing between items. You can choose from No Margin, Small, Medium, or Large options.
|-
|CSS classes
|'''NOTE''': You can enter multiple classes in the CSS Class field, separating them with spaces.
{{Note|See an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_Heading_and_body_text_font_size/weight|here]]|reminder}}

// Define Icon Width & Height

'''image-width-100 image-height-100''': substitute 100 with your preferred value to set the icon/image width and height.

// Add a style to cards:

* '''uk-card-primary''': creates a styled box with a primary color
* '''uk-background-muted''': Applies a muted background color.
* '''uk-border-rounded''': applies rounded corners.
* '''uk-box-shadow-small''' applies a small box shadow.
* '''uk-padding-small''' Adds small padding to the element.
* '''uk-padding-remove-vertical''' Removes top and bottom padding from an element (This class is handy to keep items compact in the Product Information section of Shopify Product page)
* '''uk-height-1-1''' applies a height of 100%.
* '''uk-grid-small''' Add this class to apply a small gap.
* '''uk-grid-medium''' This refers to default value which applies a medium gap
* '''uk-grid-large''' Add this class to apply a large gap
* '''uk-grid-collapse''' Add this class to remove the grid-gap entirely.

// Adjust the icon/image width and height
*Set the icon width: '''image-width-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
*Set the icon height: '''image-height-100''' (replace 100 with the desired value).
/ Adjust Vertical Alignment

* Use the '''image-middle''' class for middle alignment when positioning the icon on the left. This ensures proper vertical alignment between the icon and text blocks.

// Enable Icons With Text Slider
*Convert items into sliders: '''slider'''. Show the slider with navigation arrows: '''slider-nav'''.

// Adjust Title and Body text size and color
* Set the Heading and body text font-weight: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Set the Heading font-weight|here]].
* Apply a different color to the text element: learn more [[Block Icons With Text#Apply a different color to text element|here]].

// Use Metaobjects
* Use metaobjects as a dynamic source: '''dynamic-source''' (Learn step-by-step guide [[Block Icons With Text#How to create an Icons With Text metaobject|here]])

// Collapsible Text Columns with Icons

* '''toggle''': use this class to create Collapsible Text Columns with Icons that function similarly to an Accordion section.

// Enable Auto-scrolling:

To enable auto-scrolling (Perfect for Logo slider, scrolling announcement text, Testimonial slider, etc.), add the CSS classes below:
*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
*'''duration-10''': Specify the animation's duration (in seconds), which should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
*'''nowrap''': to show text in one row (helpful for the Scrolling Announcement bar)
*'''overflow-hidden''': the scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
*'''max-width-200''': Set item max width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:'''NOTE''': If you do not set '''max-width-value''', each image's maximum width is 280px. To set the image bigger than 280px, you must specify both '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the '''value''' as you wish. Make sure the value of '''image-width-value''' is always smaller than that of '''max-width-value'''.

// Enable Instagram Feed, Tiktok/Youtube Slider:

* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav''': show a regular Instagram/Tiktok/Youtube video slider (like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example]).
* '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100''': show an auto-scrolling instagram feed or Tiktok/Youtube video slider.

'''INFO''': Currently, the metaobjects used as a dynamic source can be used on 3 page types: product page, store page, and blog post page.

'''NOTE''': The Slider, Auto-scrolling, and Metaobject features are only available for the PRO plan. To add multiple classes, enter the classes with space between them.
|-
|Items per row on Mobile
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Mobile devices.
|-
|Items per row on Desktop
|Set the number of featured content blocks displayed per row on Desktop devices. [[File:Icons-w-text-1col.jpg|frameless|600x600px]][[File:Icons-w-text-width.jpg|frameless|600x600px]]
|-
|Animate On Scroll
|This feature is only available for the Pro plan. It lets you apply different types of animation to elements within each section as you scroll down the page. Learn more about scrolling animations [https://posstack.com/blog/easy-content-builder-new-updates-mar-2023 here].
|-
|Item Title
|Enter the title of each featured content block.
|-
|Icon
|Upload the SVG Icon, Icon Font, or Image
|-
|Body
| Add and style (bold, italic, add link) the text content that appears on each block.
|}

===Set the Heading and body text font size/weight===

To adjust the title font size, use one of these classes:

*heading-h1
*heading-h2
*heading-h3
*heading-h4
*heading-h5
*heading-h6
*heading-small
*heading-medium
*heading-large
*heading-xlarge
*heading-2xlarge
*heading-3xlarge

{{note| NOTE: '''Heading-small''' and '''heading-3xlarge''' refers to larger heading sizes in comparison to standard headings (H1 to H6). These additional sizes are useful for highlighting essential branding messages on your page while maintaining standard headings for SEO purposes.|inline}}

To adjust the body text font size, use one of these classes:

*body-fs1
*body-fs2
*body-fs3
*body-fs4
*body-fs5
*body-fs6

To adjust the weight of the title or body text to bold when needed, add one of the classes below:

*'''uk-title-bold''': set the Heading's weight to bold (See the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/monstera-deliciosa Icons with text demo] with bold title)
* '''uk-text-bold''': set the weight of both the Heading and body text to bold

{{Note|'''EXAMPLE 1''':
Here’s an example of how to add multiple classes to create an Icon With Text section. Here, `image-width-40` and `image-height-40` specify the icon dimensions, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `heading-h2` sets the heading size to H2, and `body-fs4` adjusts the paragraph text size.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-1.jpg|800px|frameless]]
'''EXAMPLE 2''':
How to use an Icon With Text section next to Add to Cart button. Here, `image-width-26` and `image-height-26` specify the icon dimensions, `heading-h3` sets the heading size to H3, `uk-title-bold` makes the heading bold, `uk-text-muted` gives the paragraph text a muted appearance.
[[File:Iwt-class-example-2.jpg|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

===Apply a different color to text element===
You can also use one of these classes to apply a different color to text elements.

*'''uk-text-muted''': Add this class to mute text.
*'''uk-text-emphasis''': Add this class to emphasize text.
*'''uk-text-primary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the primary color.
*'''uk-text-secondary''': Add this class to emphasize text with the secondary color.
*'''uk-text-success''': Add this class to indicate success.
*'''uk-text-warning''': Add this class to indicate a warning.
*'''uk-text-danger''': Add this class to indicate danger.

{{Note|'''Note''': You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them. [[File:Ecb guide icons text classes.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]|inline}}

{{Note|'''Extra Note''' Besides the default classes, you can directly change the '''Primary''', '''Secondary''', '''Success''', and other colors for your entire site via '''Easy Content Builder''' > '''Customizations''' > '''Generate Custom CSS'''. Find the step-by-step guide [[Custom_CSS#Adjust_the_button_style,_font_size,_border_radius,_background_color|here]].|reminder}}

===Create layout boxes with different card styles===
You can add a specific card style to the Icons with text block by using these additional classes:

'''uk-card-primary uk-height-1-1 uk-padding'''

{{Note|See the card style demo: [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/page-1 here]|reminder}}

By default, you can apply three styles to cards:

*'''uk-card-default''': create a visually styled box.
*'''uk-card-primary''': emphasize the card with a primary color.
*'''uk-card-secondary''': give the card a secondary background color.

[[File:Ecb guide icons text cardstyle.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

== Use cases ==
===Collapsible Text Columns with Icons.===
[[File:Iwt collapsible.jpg|frameless|800x800px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a collapsible Text Columns with Icons:
* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Enter 'toggle' class to enable collapsible Text Columns with Icons. Then add 'image-width-24' class (change the width value '24' as you wish) to set the width of your icons.
*'''Step 4''': Set your desired Items per row on Desktop/Mobile.
*'''Step 5''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.

===Scrolling announcement bar and infinite logo/image carousel.===
[[File:Ecb scrolling vid.gif|frameless|750x750px]]{{Note|NOTE: This feature is only available for the PRO plan.|inline}}

How to create a scrolling logo list/text bar/image carousel:

* '''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the slider (where you specify this section’s column layout, width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
* '''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title/body text/icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image) depending on which content type you want to display.
*'''Step 4''': enter these additional classes into the '''CSS Classes''' field depending on the scrolling style you want:
:{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, type the classes with space between them.|inline}}

:*'''scrolling''': scrolling from right to left.
:*'''scrolling-r''': scrolling from left to right.
:*'''duration-10''': Specify duration (in second) that the animation should complete one cycle. Replace '10' with your desired value.
:* '''nowrap''': showing text messages in one row (helpful for Scrolling important messages)
:*'''overflow-hidden''': scrolling items will be shown within the block's container.
:*'''max-width-200''': Set the items’ maximum width (replace 200 with your desired width).
:{{Note|NOTE: If you do not set max-width-value, each image's maximum width is '''280px''' by default. To show images bigger than 280px, you must specify both the '''image-width-value''' and '''max-width-value''' (input the value as you wish. Make sure '''image-width-value''' ≤ '''max-width-value'''.)|reminder}}

Below are a few examples of logo/text/image carousels we created for demo purposes:

:'''Scrolling announcement bar (full-width):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]'''Scrolling announcement bar (shown within a column container):'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-text-overflow-hidden.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
: '''Scrolling logo list:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-logos.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:'''Infinite image carousel:'''
:[[File:Ecb-guide-scrolling-images.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===Testimonial Carousel===
{{Note|''NOTE: This feature is only available for PRO plan.''|inline}}
You can use Icons With Text block to create a Testimonial carousel by entering these additional classes into the '''Item Style''' field:

*'''slider''': to enable the carousel
*'''slider-nav''': to enable the arrow navigation
{{Note|Note: You can add multiple classes, just type the classes with space between them.|inline}}
{{Note|See the Testimonial carousel demo [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/products/razor here].|reminder}}

'''How to create a Testimonial:'''

*'''Step 1''': Create a '''Section Settings''' to control the global settings of the carousel (The whole block width, background color, etc.)
*'''Step 2''': Create an '''Icons With Text''' section.
*'''Step 3''': Open the Icons With Text configuration and insert the title, Icon (SVG, Icon font, or Image), and body text as you wish.

'''Note''': You can define the number of Testimonial items per row from 1 up to 6 items (using the Mobile & Desktop configuration).

Below is an example of a Testimonial carousel that displays 3 items:

[[File:Add testimonial slider.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to add SVG icons to Icons With Text ===

=====Upload SVG icons=====
{{Note|AUG 2023 - IMPORTANT NOTE:

Shopify now allows uploading SVG files. For those who used SVG inline (under the Icons With Text block), which is now deprecated, you are required to re-upload those SVG icons to be compatible with the new change in Shopify. Then update your icons' width by following [[Block_Icons_With_Text#Set_the_icon_width|this guide]].|inline}}

=====Set the icon width =====
To adjust the icon's width, simply enter the extra class into the ''CSS classes'' field: '''image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value).

=====Change the SVG icon color=====
Here are steps to adjust the SVG icon's color:

*'''Step 1''': Convert your '''HEX color''' to CSS filter property.
:Simply use [https://posstack.com/css-color-filter-generator/ this free tool], enter your HEX color format (e.g. #121212) to convert to CSS filter property. Then, copy the generated CSS filter result.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-convert.png|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]
*'''Step 2''': Navigate back to your Theme Editor > click on the '''App''' section containing the '''Icons With Text''' block where you want to change the SVG icons' color.
* '''Step 3''': Paste the generated CSS filter property into the '''Custom CSS''' field. And hit Save.
:[[File:CSS-color-filter-generator.jpg|border|frameless|1024x1024px]]

===How to create an Icons With Text metaobject ===

{{Note|Note: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources is available for the Pro version only. [https://apps.shopify.com/easy-content-builder Go Pro]. |inline}}

{{Note|'''When to use the Icons with Text metaobject''':
* Showcasing a slider or grid of text columns with icons (more than 6 items)
* Featuring an auto-scrolling [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-video Instagram Feed/TikTok & YouTube slider] (links open in a modal)|reminder}}

'''Step-by-step guide''':

The following guidelines explain how to create an Icons with Text grid, which can also be applied to set up an Instagram/TikTok or YouTube slider.

'''Video Tutorial''':

Watch this [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9B08nQeX11g video tutorial] to discover how to add video sliders from YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or Vimeo to your Shopify product page using Icons With Text metaobjects.
[[File:Ecb youtube video slider iwt.jpg|800px|frameless]]

======Step 1: Update Staff permissions======
If your store has multiple staff members, make sure you assign the right permission for staff to work on the metaobjects.
:[[File:Staff-permission.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

:Otherwise, your staff can not add entries when working with the metaobjects.

: [[File:Permission notice.png|frameless|785x785px]]

======Step 2: Create Metaobjects======
*From your Shopify admin, navigate to Apps > Posstack Easy Content Builder > '''Custom Data'''.
*Click on '''Create''' next to the desired content type (Icons With Text, Tabs, Accordions). Once created, you should see the message ''Metaobject and Metafield created'':
: [[File:Metaobject created.png|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To create an Instagram Feed/ Tiktok & Youtube Slider like [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you simply create '''Icons With Text''' metaobject in this step. |reminder}}

* And all metafields associated with the above-mentioned metaobjects are automatically created too. You can check those metafields by following these steps:
**In your Shopify admin, click Settings > '''Custom data'''
**You should see 3 metafields Products, Pages, Blog Posts:
:[[File:Metafields created.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]

**Click on each metafield Products, Pages, or Blog Posts to see the metafield definitions:
:[[File:Metafield definitions.png|frameless|871x871px]]

======Step 3: Create entries for the Metaobjects======
* From your Shopify admin, select the part of your store that you want to add a metaobject to. For example, '''Products''' (Easy Content Builder now supports metaobjects for Products, Pages, Blog Posts).
*Click the name of a product you want to edit.
*In the '''Metafields''' section, click on the form field to add an entry (ECB Accordions, ECB Tabs, or ECB Icons With Text depending on which metaobjects you created in '''Step 2''')
:[[File:Add-entries.jpg|frameless|645x645px]]
*Next, click '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry''' and complete the fields for your entry. Once done, click '''Save'''.
:[[File:Add-entries-detail.png|frameless|750x750px]]
:To create other entries, you repeat the exact steps by clicking '''Select Entry''' > '''Create New Entry'''. If you have already created entries, simply click the checkboxes to determine which entries will be displayed on your storefront. Here is an example of metaobject entries we created for demo purposes:
:[[File:Icon entry examples.jpg|frameless|594x594px]]
:{{Note|Here's a sample Metaobject entry that stores the Instagram video information, which will be displayed on the storefront in a format similar to the [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider Instagram Feed/Tiktok & Youtube Slider] example.[[File:Ecb instagram entry.png|800px|frameless]]
|reminder}}

*Once done, click '''Save'''.

====== Step 4: Connecting metaobjects to your Online Store through dynamic sources======
*From your Shopify admin, click Apps > '''Easy Content Builder'''
*From the Easy Content Builder dashboard, click '''Manage Templates'''.
*Then select the template that you want to edit and click '''Customize'''.
*From the Theme Editor, open the ''Icons With Text'' block where you want to edit. Then insert two classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source image-width-100''' (replace '''100''' with the desired value for your icons' width).
:{{Note|When you add the class '''dynamic-source''' to Icons With Text, it will automatically link to your metaobjects (list entries type). This means you won't have to manually map each individual entry in Icons With Text. Importantly, this approach allows you to add more than 6 items, compared to manually mapping each field.|reminder}}
:[[File:Dynamic source.jpg|frameless|1024x1024px]]
:{{Note|To display the Instagram Feed or Tiktok video slider as shown in [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-instagram-feed-tiktok-youtube-slider this example], you should input the following classes into the CSS classes field: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 slider slider-nav'''|reminder}}
:{{Note|Or input the following classes into the CSS classes field to show an auto-scrolling instagram feed: '''dynamic-source modal image-width-400 scrolling duration-100'''|inline}}

==Add other content blocks==
You can add many content blocks to a section you've created. These content blocks will be displayed in different positions within the section, depending on the Desktop/Mobile Layouts you configure.

[[File:Ecb-block-v2.jpg|border|frameless|800x800px]]

{{Note|See [https://easy-content-builder-demo.myshopify.com/pages/section-variations all content blocks] available that you can add to a section.|reminder}}